JP7537888B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are some that can execute effects using movable objects that can be operated. In this type of gaming machine, for example, there are some that can execute effects similar to effects in which a movable object as a structure is moved by displaying a pseudo movable object display in a moving manner (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-92949 A

Unlike the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 above, the pseudo-movable body is simply displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the entertainment value of the presentation.

The present invention has been made in consideration of such problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the simulated moving body display.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body that is movably provided;
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies a performance result by operating the movable body, and a suggestion performance that suggests that the specific performance will be executed by operating the movable body before the specific performance is executed;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
Equipped with
The movable body is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position,
The performance execution means includes:
When executing the specific performance, a first effect image is displayed for the movable body;
When the suggestion performance is being performed, a specific image is displayed and the appearance of the specific image is changed.
A notice regarding the advantageous state can be executed,
During the period in which the aspect of the specific image is being changed, the preview performance is not executed,
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.

A predetermined effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be moved during the predetermined performance and the special performance.
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the predetermined performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden;
the effect execution means displays a second effect image different from the first effect image when the pseudo movable body display is displayed in a moving manner;
The pseudo movable body display includes a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display having a different aspect from the first pseudo movable body display.
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, the gaming machine of the means 1 is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body that is operably arranged (e.g., a mounted movable body 32, a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R),
a specific performance (e.g., movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B) that notifies the result of the performance by operating the movable body (e.g., first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R), and a suggestion performance (e.g., movable body operation suggestion performance A or movable body operation suggestion performance B) that suggests that the specific performance will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific performance is executed; and
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A movable body effect execution means capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and an effect related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body (e.g., the mounted movable body 32) is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position,
The performance execution means includes:
When the suggestion performance is executed, an effect image for the movable body is not displayed, whereas when the specific performance is executed, an effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 to 10-35, while the movable body operation suggestion performance B is being executed, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, whereas an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body operation performance B).
When the suggestive performance is being performed, a specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of super reach β1, an ally character B and an enemy character A are displayed and enlarged, and during the reach performance of super reach β2, an ally character B and an enemy character B are displayed and enlarged),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, a portion in which an effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period),
A preview performance (for example, a look-ahead preview performance) that predicts that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state can be executed, and the execution of the preview performance is restricted when the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, a portion that restricts the execution of the look-ahead preview performance during a reach performance including an enlarged display period).
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
The movable body performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body performance in which the movable body (e.g., the mounted movable body 32) is moved from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body more noticeable, thereby improving the interest in the game. Also, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the specific image from decreasing due to the execution of the advance notice performance. Also, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing effects using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in JP 2019-92949 A, and capable of executing effects similar to effects in which a movable body as a structure is moved by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body display. However, such gaming machines have a problem in that they only move and display the pseudo-movable body in the same way as a movable body, and are unable to enhance the interest of the effects. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A movable body effect execution means capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and an effect related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. A diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading preview effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. A figure showing an example of updating the first pending memory display area and the second pending memory display area. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable object control timer. FIG. This is a timing chart for the variable display of Super Reach α1 jackpot and Super Reach α2 jackpot. This is a timing chart for the variable display of Super Reach α1 failure and Super Reach α2 failure. This is a timing chart for the variable display of Super Reach β1 jackpot and Super Reach β2 jackpot. This is a timing chart for variable display of Super Reach β1 failure and Super Reach β2 failure. 13 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting operation and the image enlargement ratio during each enlarged display period. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the presentation mode of each movable object action suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the presentation mode of each movable object action effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode leading up to a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of reach presentation in an image display device in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of reach presentation in an image display device in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the final performance type, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the final performance type. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance operations of strong super reach performances. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
When the suggestion performance is executed, an effect image for the movable body is not displayed, whereas when the specific performance is executed, an effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 to 10-35, while the movable body operation suggestion performance B is being executed, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, whereas an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body operation performance B).
When the suggestive performance is being performed, a specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of super reach β1, an ally character B and an enemy character A are displayed and enlarged, and during the reach performance of super reach β2, an ally character B and an enemy character B are displayed and enlarged),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, a portion in which an effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body stand out even more, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display is different between a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing in the enlarged display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, a portion in which the enlargement speed is different between a first enlarged display period and a second enlarged display period),
The movement speed of the movable body in the suggestion performance is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the movement speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect of the enlarged display can be improved, and the control load related to the operation of the movable body can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1 or 2,
A non-enlarged period in which the specific image is not enlarged after the second timing (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, a period from the end of the enlarged display period to the start of a movable body operation presentation or a miss notification presentation),
The display mode during the non-enlarged period is different from the display mode immediately before the non-enlarged period (for example, in modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, a specific performance or an effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 different from the display mode immediately before the end of the enlarged display period).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easy to recognize that the period is a non-expansion period.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect,
The performance execution means is capable of gradually enlarging and displaying the specific image even after the repeated motion of the movable body is completed (for example, a portion that executes the enlarged display during a third enlarged display period shown in FIG. 10-21 to FIG. 10-24 ),
The enlargement speed at the second timing is slower than the enlargement speed at the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed at the second enlarged display period is slower than that at the first enlarged display period),
The enlargement speed of the enlarged display after the repeated movement of the movable body is completed is slower than the enlargement speed at the second timing (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, the third enlarged display period is a portion where the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period).
According to this feature, the enlarged display of the specific image continues even after the repeated movement of the movable body has ended, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a preview performance (for example, a pre-read preview performance) that predicts that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, during the reach performance including the enlarged display period, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted).
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the specific image from decreasing due to the execution of the preview performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 6 is the gaming machine according to aspects 1 to 5,
The effect execution means has different visibility of the specific image when the movable body is operated in the suggestion effect and when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can see the reach effect during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect B, but as shown in Figs. 10-33 and 10-35, the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying an explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body operation effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visibility of the specific image changes depending on the motion state of the movable body, making it easier to distinguish whether the motion is a suggestive performance or a specific performance, and the degree of attention to the movable body and the specific image can be adjusted.

The gaming machine of aspect 7 is the gaming machine according to aspects 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in the modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle effect),
The first effect image and the second effect image are different in size (for example, in a modified example 109SG-3, an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of a movable body is different in size from an effect image corresponding to the progress of a battle performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image can be displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, in a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle effect),
The image transparency of the first effect image and the image transparency of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modified example 109SG-3, the image transparency of an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of a movable body is made different from that of an effect image corresponding to the progress of a battle performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image can be displayed.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A specific image can be displayed when the specific performance is being performed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, a portion that displays ally character B and enemy character A during the reach performance of super reach β1, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2).
The motion of the movable body in the suggestion performance is ended a predetermined period before the timing at which the movable body starts to move in the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, a portion in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is ended a period T3 before the start of the execution of the movable body motion performance),
Before and after the predetermined period, different types of effect sounds can be output (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 and 10-23, during the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, background music, sound effects, and action suggestion sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the execution of the movable body action suggestion effect, background music, sound effects, and big win notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
The number of types of sound effects during the specified period is smaller than the number of types of sound effects output immediately before the specified period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during period T3, only SE is output from speakers 8L and 8R).
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of effect sound has changed before and after a predetermined period during which the movable body is not moving.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A specific image can be displayed when the specific performance is being performed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, a portion that displays ally character B and enemy character A during the reach performance of super reach β1, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2).
The motion of the movable body in the suggestion performance is ended a predetermined period before the timing at which the movable body starts to move in the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, a part in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is ended a period T3 before the start of the execution of the movable body motion performance),
The predetermined period is longer than the execution period of one unit operation that is repeatedly performed by the movable body, and is shorter than the period during which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, period T3 is a portion that is longer than period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position).
The operation period of the movable body in the specific performance is longer than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is a portion that is shorter than the period T2 in which the movable body operation suggestion performance is executed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to prevent an action in a specific performance from being mistaken for an action in a suggested performance, and also prevents a decrease in interest due to the duration of the suggestion being longer than the duration of the movement of the moving body in the specific performance that is the subject of the suggestion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A specific image can be displayed when the specific performance is being performed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, a portion that displays ally character B and enemy character A during the reach performance of super reach β1, and displays ally character B and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2).
The motion of the movable body in the suggestion performance is ended a predetermined period before the timing at which the movable body starts to move in the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, a portion in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is ended a period T3 before the start of the execution of the movable body motion performance),
During the predetermined period, at least the visibility of the background image is set to a first low visibility state in which the visibility is low (for example, as a modified example 109SG-4, during the period from the end of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state that is lower than that before the end of the enlarged display period),
When the movable body is caused to start moving after the predetermined period of time, a second low visibility state is set in which visibility is even lower than the first low visibility state (for example, as variant example 109SG04, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to a second low visibility state which is even lower than the first low visibility state, thereby further reducing the visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters).
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier to recognize that a specified period has passed, and also draws attention to the movement of the moving object in a particular performance.

A gaming machine according to aspect 12,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A specific image is displayed when the specific performance and the suggestive performance are being performed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged while the suggestive performance is being performed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of super reach β1, a section displays ally character B and enemy character A and enlarges the display of ally character B and enemy character A, and during the reach performance of super reach β2, a section displays ally character B and enemy character B and enlarges the display of ally character B and enemy character B),
The motion of the movable body in the suggestion performance is ended a predetermined period before the timing at which the movable body starts to move in the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, a part in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is ended a period T3 before the start of the execution of the movable body motion performance),
The movement of the movable body is started before the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in modified example 109SG-1, a part in which a movable body movement suggestion performance is executed from a timing before the enlarged display of the ally character and the enemy character is started),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier to recognize that a specified period has passed, and also draws attention to the repetitive movement of the movable object in the suggestive performance.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the ninth to twelfth aspects,
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a movable body LED 109SG495) capable of emitting light,
The performance execution means controls the light-emitting unit to a non-light-emitting state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body LED 109SG495 is turned off during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable body is not moving for a predetermined period of time.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
The movable body includes a first movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401) and a second movable body (e.g., a second movable body 109SG402L and a third movable body 109SG402R) that can operate independently of the first movable body,
The performance execution means includes:
In the repeated operation of the suggestion performance, only one of the first movable body or the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body operation suggestion performance B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated),
In the operation of the specific performance, both the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in Figures 10-33 and 10-35, in the movable body operation performance B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all operated).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the movement of the movable body is a movement of a suggestive effect or a movement of a specific effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourteenth aspects,
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a movable body LED 109SG495) capable of emitting light,
The performance execution means includes:
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the light-emitting portion emits light at a first luminance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a luminance C1 during a first enlarged display period, a second enlarged display period, and a third enlarged display period).
During at least the period during which the performance result is notified in the specific performance, the light-emitting unit is caused to emit light at a second luminance higher than the first luminance (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-21 and 10-23, during the execution of the movable body operation performance, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at a luminance C2 higher than the luminance C1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize that this is a period in which a performance result is to be shown, and interest in this period can be increased.

A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A specific image is displayed when the specific performance and the suggestive performance are being performed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged while the suggestive performance is being performed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed in a portion where these ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged, and during the reach performance of super reach β2, ally character B and enemy character B are displayed in a portion where these ally character B and enemy character B are enlarged).
When the movable body is operated in the suggestion performance, a performance image of a different type from the performance image displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific performance can be displayed (for example, as variant example 109SG-5, a part in which different performance images are displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body operation performance and during the execution of the movable body operation performance),
In the suggestion performance, the number of types of performance images displayed when the movable body is operated is greater than the number of types of performance images displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific performance (for example, as variant example 109SG-5, the number of types of performance images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion performance is greater than the number of types of performance images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body operation performance),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during a suggestive performance in which an action is repeated, a variety of performance images are displayed, thereby increasing interest during the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
A presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 executes the variable display presentation process shown in FIG. 10-19 ) capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a movable body action presentation A or a movable body action presentation B) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable body, and a suggestion presentation (for example, a movable body action suggestion presentation A or a movable body action suggestion presentation B) that suggests that the specific presentation will be executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific presentation is executed;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the suggestion performance, a suggested action corresponding image corresponding to the action of the movable body can be displayed (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body action suggestion performance, a part that displays a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance on the image display device 5),
In the specific performance, a performance action corresponding image corresponding to the action of the movable body can be displayed (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body action performance, an image different from the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is displayed as a movable body action performance corresponding image corresponding to the movable body action performance on the image display device 5).
The period during which the suggested action corresponding image is displayed is different from the period during which the performance action corresponding image is displayed (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, a portion in which the display period of the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is different from the display period of the movable body action performance corresponding image),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the specific image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display period of the suggestive action corresponding image and the performance action corresponding image can be set to a period corresponding to each action of the movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect 18 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17,
The performance execution means controls the performance action corresponding image to a low visibility state with reduced visibility when the performance action corresponding image is displayed (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, when the movable body action performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, the visibility of the movable body action performance corresponding image is reduced by reducing the contrast or brightness of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase attention to the moving objects that move during a particular performance.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventeenth or eighteenth aspect,
The performance execution means includes:
During the period when the suggested action corresponding image is displayed, a suggested action corresponding sound corresponding to the suggested action corresponding image can be output (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, when a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, a part that outputs a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image from the speaker 8L8R).
During the period in which the effect action corresponding image is displayed, an effect action corresponding sound that is different from the suggested action corresponding sound and corresponds to the effect action corresponding image can be output (for example, as a modified example 109SG-6, when a movable body action corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, a part that outputs a movable body action corresponding sound that corresponds to the movable body action corresponding image from the speaker 8L8R).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to each corresponding image that is displayed.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the 17th to 19th aspects,
The performance execution means is characterized by displaying the performance action corresponding image prior to a timing at which the movable body starts moving in the specific performance.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation for the start of the movement of the moving body in a particular performance, and also to further increase attention to the movement of the moving body.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
a specific performance (e.g., movable body operation performance A) that notifies the result of the performance by operating the movable body, and a suggestion performance that suggests that the specific performance will be executed without operating the movable body by displaying a special image before the specific performance is executed (e.g., movable body operation suggestion performance A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 in the image display device 5); and a performance execution means (e.g., a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10-19) capable of executing the above;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the suggestion performance, the special image is displayed in a manner of approaching the movable body at a first speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body operation performance A is executed, a portion in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1).
In the specific performance, the special image is displayed in a manner such that it moves away from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body operation performance A is executed, a portion in the image display device 5 in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving at a speed V2 from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5),
During the display period of the special image, at least the background image is displayed in a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-30, during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion performance A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A or enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When the specific performance is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-30, a portion that displays ally character A and enemy character A during the reach performance of super reach α1, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach α2).
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the special image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special image can be made to stand out, and the movement of the special image can draw attention to the movable body, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the movement of the movable body and increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body 109SG402L, a third movable body 109SG402R) that is operably provided;
a specific performance (e.g., movable body operation performance A) that notifies the result of the performance by operating the movable body, and a suggestion performance that suggests that the specific performance will be performed without operating the movable body by displaying a special image that gradually approaches the movable body at a first speed before the specific performance is performed (e.g., movable body operation suggestion performance A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 in the image display device 5); and a performance execution means (e.g., a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10-19) that can execute the above;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
In the suggestion performance, the special image is displayed in a manner that repeatedly acts at a first speed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body operation performance A is executed, a portion in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1).
In the specific performance, the special image is displayed in a manner such that it moves away from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body operation performance A is executed, a portion in the image display device 5 in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving at a speed V2 from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5),
During the display period of the special image, the effect images other than the special image are displayed in a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-30, during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When the specific performance is being performed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-28 and 10-30, a portion that displays ally character A and enemy character A during the reach performance of super reach α1, and displays ally character A and enemy character B during the reach performance of super reach β2).
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the image being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of Super Reach β2 in which ally character B and enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display of Super Reach β1 in which ally character B and enemy character A are displayed during a reach performance).
The control period of the movable body by the performance execution means is different from the update period of the special image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special image can be made to stand out, and the movement of the special image can draw attention to the movable body, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the movement of the movable body and increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21 or 22,
The performance execution means makes the special image invisible for a predetermined period immediately before the start timing of the movement of the movable body in the specific performance (as shown in FIG. 10-28(F) and FIG. 10-30(F), before the execution of the movable body movement performance A or the miss notification performance, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by hiding the special image, it is possible to easily recognize that the movement of the movable body is about to begin.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 21 to 23,
The first speed is a speed within a predetermined range, and the first speed changes within the predetermined range depending on the proximity of the special image (for example, as shown in variant example 109SG-7, the part in which the speed V1 is variable within a predetermined range),
The second speed is a speed faster than the maximum speed of the predetermined range (for example, as shown in modified example 109SG-7, the speed V2 of a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of movable body operation performance A is a part that is faster than the maximum speed V1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the moving speed of the special image changes, which can increase interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 21 to 24,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to output a plurality of action sound effects corresponding to the repeated action of the movable body or the action of the special image (for example, a portion capable of outputting a plurality of sounds as action suggestion sounds or big win notification sounds output from speakers 8L and 8R),
It is possible to output different action sound effects depending on the output timing (for example, a portion that can output different sounds from speakers 8L and 8R depending on the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound is started by providing multiple output start timings for the action suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is easy to recognize that the repetitive action of the movable body or the action of the special image is being performed, and the action sound effect changes according to the timing of output, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 109SG)
Next, a characteristic part 109SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the characteristic part 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 109SG. As shown in Fig. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410. A first movable body 109SG401 is disposed in the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, a second movable body 109SG402L is disposed on the left side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and a third movable body 109SG402R is disposed on the right side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction.

The movable body unit 109SG400 also has a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the third movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in this characteristic part 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. In addition, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built into a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, the upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of these first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 can be moved by the drive of the first movable body motor 109SG421 from a retracted position (see FIG. 10-3(A)) below the image display device 5 to a suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3(B)) and to a performance position above the suggested position and directly in front of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 10-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R can be moved from a retracted position (see FIG. 10-3(A)) below the image display device 5 to positions adjacent to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (see FIG. 10-3(C)) by the drive of the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423.

In this characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in Figs. 10-3(A) to 10-3(C), a state in which the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all located in the retracted position is referred to as the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400, and a state in which the first movable body 109SG401 is located in the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body The second state of the movable body unit 109SG400 is when 109SG402R is in the retracted position, and the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400 is when the first movable body 109SG401 is in the performance position and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are in adjacent positions to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401, which is in the performance position.

Figure 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 109SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 10-4 (A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable hit or non-probable hit), and whether it will be a small hit, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 10-5, in this feature section 109SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this characteristic section 109SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 109SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 109SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 109SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 109SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 10-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 109SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature section 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 10-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 109SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 109SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 10-7(B). In this feature section 109SG, the following jackpot types are set: "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). And the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" and "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of a special jackpot will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a special jackpot, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the jackpot game state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature section 109SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 10-8 shows the variation patterns in this characteristic part 109SG. In this characteristic part 109SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 109SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature section 109SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 10-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in this feature section 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic section 109SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for super reach β1 jackpot), and PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern for super reach β2 jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1 is the same in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, but the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are different. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 2 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 45 to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 2 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 30 to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, the variable pattern is determined to be PB1-4 or PB1-5, which are the variable patterns of Super Reach β1 and β2, with a higher probability than when the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the variable pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variable pattern determination table is selected, and the variable pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variable pattern) using the special hit variable pattern determination table. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variable pattern whether the variable display result is a special big hit C or a small hit, so it is difficult for the player to determine from the variable pattern whether the variable display result is a special big hit C or a small hit.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β1 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α1 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α1 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β1 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 109SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figures 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of super reach α1 in feature section 109SG (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) has a special chart variable display time of 40 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A as the reach performance of the super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3, PB1-3) has a special chart variable display time of 50 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B as the reach performance of the super reach. The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4, PB1-4) has a special chart variable display time of 60 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A as the reach performance of the super reach. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variation patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special chart variable display time of 60 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A as a reach performance of the Super Reach.

And, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot expectancy of each variable display in this feature section 109SG is set highest for Super Reach β2, followed by Super Reach β1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-reach in descending order (jackpot expectancy of each variable display in this feature section 109SG: Super Reach β2 > Super Reach β1 > Super Reach α2 > Super Reach α1 > Normal Reach > Non-reach).

In other words, when we look at the variable display of the Super Reach, in this feature section 109SG, the expectation of a big win differs depending on the combination of whether the ally character displayed in the battle performance (Super Reach Reach performance) is ally character A or ally character B, and whether the enemy character displayed in the battle performance (Super Reach Reach performance) is enemy character A or enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 109SG is provided with a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 109SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 109SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 109SG151C, a game control flag setting section 109SG152, a game control timer setting section 109SG153, a game control counter setting section 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 109SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 109SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 109SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 109SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 109SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 109SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 109SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 109SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 109SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A of this feature section 109SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a reserved display flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the reserved memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)), and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 109SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 109SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 109SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 5 will be described based on Fig. 10-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 109SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 109SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 109SGS103 or step 109SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 (step 109SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 109SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 109SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 10-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 109SGS112 in Figure 10-12 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 109SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S22 in Figure 5, Figure 10-11) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S23 in Figure 5, Figure 10-12) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 109SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 109SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 109SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 109SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 109SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 109SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 109SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10-9, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which is within the possible range of the random number value MR3 used to determine the fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 109SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 109SGS135), and proceeds to step 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern determination tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 109SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 109SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by, for example, checking the contents stored in the performance control command receiving buffer (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If a command is received in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate winning at the first starting port, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command (step 109SGS222).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is not a command to designate a win at the first starting port (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate a win at the second starting port (step 109SGS224).

If the received command in step 109SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command in step 109SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command in step 109SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command in step 109SGS228 is not the first pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is a first start port winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), if the received command in step 109SGS224 is a second start port winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), if the received command in step 109SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), or if the received command in step 109SGS227 is a variable category command (step 1 If the command received in step 109SGS227 is the first pending memory count notification command (109SGS228; Y), or if the command received in step 109SGS230 is the second pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 109SG194A shown in Figure 10-11 (step 109SGS233), and processing returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A.

If the received command in step 109SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and processing returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is a start port winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area of the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the received command is a start port winning designation command, a timer is set to wait for the reception of the reserved memory number notification command, and if the reserved memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memory that has not received the reserved memory number notification command may be set as not being subject to the pre-reading preview performance described below.

Figure 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 10-15, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241) and determines whether there is a reserved memory (entry) with the reserved display flag not set (step 109SGS242a). If there is no reserved memory with the reserved display flag not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process ends, and if there is a reserved memory with the reserved display flag not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), it further determines whether the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not a Super Reach reach performance is in progress can be determined by checking whether the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (whether or not variable display is in progress), and if the value of the performance control process flag is 2, the contents of the process data for the variable display being executed can be referenced to determine whether or not a Super Reach reach performance is in progress.

If the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), proceed to step 109SGS250. If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry (entry in which the reserved display flag is not set) is a symbol designation command indicating a small win (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small win (step 109SGS243a; Y), proceed to step 109SGS250. If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a miss or a big win (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a first symbol designation command (a symbol designation command indicating a miss) (step 109SGS243b).

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, i.e., if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), the type of jackpot is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the type of jackpot identified in step 109SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16 is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type). In the example of the determination ratio setting shown in FIG. 10-16, the determination ratio for whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type) is varied depending on the type of jackpot identified in the processing of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-16, when the jackpot type is a "probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a "non-probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and display pattern β is executed as the display pattern (notice type), the probability that the jackpot type will be a special jackpot is higher than when display pattern α is executed, and the player's anticipation of a special jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is always decided, and one of the display patterns, display pattern α in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) or display pattern β in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white star (☆), is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a jackpot, there may be a case where it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, just as when the variable display result is a "miss."

In addition, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of an entry whose display pending flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 109SGS243b; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry whose display pending flag is on is identified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 109SGS247, the pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) is made using a decision ratio such as that shown in FIG. 10-16. In the example of the decision ratio setting shown in FIG. 10-16, the decision ratio as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 109SGS247.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types): display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a specific form of a white square (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a specific form of a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. In addition, when the pre-reading notice performance is determined to be non-executed, the reserved memory display is displayed in a normal form of a circle (○) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

As shown in FIG. 10-16, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable category is "other", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable pattern category is "other", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach", and if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss," the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined not to be executed is set to the highest, regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach," "other," or "super reach," and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the predictive preview performance is not determined to be non-executed (no preview performance), and the rate at which the predictive preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern α or display pattern β is determined is set to be higher than the rate at which display pattern α or display pattern β is determined in any of the variable pattern categories when the variable display result is a "miss."

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss (non-reach)", "Miss (super reach)", or "Miss (other)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern α is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "jackpot (probable jackpot)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed); in particular, when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the probability that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "probable jackpot" increases, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

After executing step 109SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 109SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, that is, whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 109SGS249).

After step 109SGS245 is executed or if it is decided to execute the preview performance (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is display pattern α showing the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is display pattern β showing the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Also, in step 109SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 109SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white "circle" (step 109SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

As mentioned above, even when the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small win (step 109SGS243a), the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating a white "circle" (step 109SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display flag set to "0", "1", or "2". Also, when the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the hold display of the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U located at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, as shown in FIG. 10-17.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special memory, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of second special reserved memories is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory, for example, the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a manner corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a manner corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

And each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and the reserved memory display also shifts in a predetermined shift direction (towards the center of the screen in this feature part 109SG), as shown in FIG. 10-17.

In other words, when the reserved memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described below, which is executed when the variable display starts, and the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed based on the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, and if there is a new reserved memory due to the start winning, the display pattern of that reserved memory is determined and set in the reserved display flag, and it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag.

Note that, in this characteristic section 109SG, an example is shown in which the processing of step 109SGS252 is executed in the advance notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold display in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process different from the advance notice setting process (for example, a hold display update process).

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, a decision is made in step 109SGS242 as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory at the start winning, on the condition that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning. However, if a start winning at the first start winning port and a start winning at the second start winning port occur simultaneously, and it is determined in step 109SGS242 that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning in both the first and second special charts, in other words, if an entry with the display pending flag in the on state exists in both the first and second special chart reserved memory, then both entries are subject to the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance. If the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special chart is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special chart is newly stored are both targets for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed simultaneously in both the pending display of the pending memory of the first special chart and the pending display of the second special chart.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute only one of the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart and the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

Figure 10-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 109SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 109SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 109SGS282).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 109SGS283). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 109SGS284). The variable display control timer is also set to a first time (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the first time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other performances (see Figure 10-20).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 109SGS287). If the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), a second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 every time the first time elapses. This realizes movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (see FIG. 10-20).

After execution of step 109SGS288, or if the variable display fluctuation pattern is not a Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance processing (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 109SGS286).

Figure 10-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (steps 109SGS301, 109SGS302, and 109SGS303). In addition, if the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable object control timer is reduced by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After executing step 109SGS303c, or if there is no variable display of the Super Reach (step 109SGS303b; N), proceed to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 109SGS308). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the processing of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a Super Reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is a Super Reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data (step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the movable body control timer is set to the second time again) and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not a Super Reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable object control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 without executing the processes of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i.

Next, it is confirmed whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen (the screen to be displayed 33 ms after the previous image update time) that includes the left, center, and right decorative patterns during the variable display, and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

Also, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern determination command is received, the control will transition to one that stops the variation. For example, even if a variable pattern specification command is received that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 109SGS306, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

Next, we will explain the operation of each presentation device during the reach presentation of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 in feature section 109SG. We will explain the presentation mode of the variable display based on Figures 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, for the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, when the reach performance of Super Reach α1 or Super Reach α2 begins, the enlarged display of the character images (ally character A and enemy character A in the reach performance of Super Reach α1, and ally character A and enemy character B in the reach performance of Super Reach α2) displayed on the image display device 5 during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1x) to display magnification m1, in the second enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from display magnification m1 to display magnification m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from display magnification m2 to display magnification m3. After the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification when the predetermined period has elapsed.

In this characteristic section 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Also, as shown in Figs. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between each display magnification is the largest between the normal display magnification and display magnification m1, and the smallest between display magnification m2 and display magnification m3. In other words, in this characteristic section 109SG, the enlargement speed of the character image is set to be the fastest during the first enlarged display period and the slowest during the third enlarged display period (enlargement speed of the character image: first enlarged display period > second enlarged display period > third enlarged display period). In this characteristic section 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" refers to a large image enlargement rate per unit time.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the period consisting of the first and second enlarged display periods (the period during which the movable body movement suggestion performance is executed) may be referred to as period T2, and the period consisting of the third enlarged display period and a predetermined period during which the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 may be referred to as period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to positions adjacent to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 (after the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retreat positions (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) to execute movable body operation performance A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a miss, a miss notification performance is executed to notify the user that the variable display result is a miss by not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the execution period of the movable object performance A and the miss notification performance may be referred to as period T4. Of these periods T2 to T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of periods T2 to T4: period T4 > period T2 > period T3).

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body action suggestion performance A and movable body action performance A (only when the variable display result is a jackpot).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, the image display device 5 executes movable body operation suggestion performance A, in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period).

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as part of the movable body operation presentation A described above, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move (spread) from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2 over a period T4. The absolute value of speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of speed V1. In other words, the movable body operation presentation A in this feature portion 109SG is also a presentation in which the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move faster than the movable body operation suggestion presentation A.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, the movable body LED 109SG495 is also illuminated. Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C1 during the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) and during the middle of period T3 (more precisely, from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C2, which is higher than brightness C1, during period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of sound effects can be output from speakers 8L and 8R: background music such as music, SE (sound effects), action suggestion sounds, and jackpot notification sounds. The type of sound output varies depending on the time during the reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22, BGM is a performance sound that is output from speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped only during period T3. In other words, the output of BGM during the reach performance is executed from the start timing of the reach performance to the end timing of period T2, and over period T4.

Sound effects (SE) are also sound effects that are output from speakers 8L, 8R from the start of the variable display, just like background music, but unlike background music, there is no period during which output from speakers 8L, 8R is stopped. In other words, the output of SEs in reach performances is executed throughout the entire reach performance.

The action suggestion sound is a sound effect output from speakers 8L, 8R as part of movable body action suggestion performance A. In other words, the action suggestion sound is output only during period T2, which is the execution period of movable body action suggestion performance A, and is not output during any other period. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from speakers 8L, 8R as part of movable body action performance A. In other words, the jackpot notification sound is output only during period T4, which is the execution period of movable body action performance A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output during any other period.

As shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-24, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, when the reach performance of Super Reach β1 or Super Reach β2 begins, the character images (ally character B and enemy character A in the reach performance of Super Reach β1, and ally character B and enemy character B in the reach performance of Super Reach β2) displayed on the image display device 5 during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period are enlarged.

Hereinafter, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, the light emission state of the movable body LED 109SG495, and the output of BGM, SE, action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R will be omitted because they are the same as the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-22.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body 109SG401 (after the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retreat positions (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the third state to the first state), and movable body operation performance B is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-24, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a miss, a miss notification performance is executed from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display by not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, which notifies the player that the variable display result is a miss. Movable body performance B is a performance executed over period T4, just like the movable body performance A and the miss notification performance described above.

During the reach performance of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, as shown in Figures 10-23 and 10-24, a movable body operation suggestion performance B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position during the movable body operation suggestion performance B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 (length of periods T1 to T4: period T4 > period T2 > period T3 > period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the movable body movement suggestion effect is executed in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, but the movable body movement suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Also, among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period is set to have the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (largest image enlargement rate per unit time), and the third enlarged display period is set to have the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (smallest image enlargement rate per unit time).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), comparing movable body operation suggestion performance A and movable body operation suggestion performance B, movable body operation suggestion performance A is a performance in which a star-shaped effect image 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 on the image display device 5 (multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself does not move, whereas movable body operation suggestion performance B is a performance in which the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between a retracted position and a suggested position, which is different. On the other hand, movable body operation suggestion performance A and movable body operation suggestion performance B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a brightness C1 during the performance period.

As shown in Figure 10-26 (B), comparing movable body operation performance A and movable body operation performance B, movable body operation performance A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from a retracted position to a performance position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S spread out from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. Movable body operation performance B is a performance in which the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and differs from movable body operation performance A in that the display of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. Furthermore, both movable body operation performance A and movable body operation performance B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

Next, the display mode of the reach performance on the image display device 5 in the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 will be explained based on Figures 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in Figures 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), a short time after the variable display of either Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, or Super Reach β2 begins, the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R stop in a combination indicating a reach. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in this reach state, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A will start as a reach performance (see Fig. 10-27 (C) and Fig. 10-28 (A)), if the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B will start as a reach performance (see Fig. 10-27 (D) and Fig. 10-30 (A)), if the variable display is a variable display of super reach β1, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A will start as a reach performance (see Fig. 10-27 (E) and Fig. 10-32 (A)), and if the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character B will start as a reach performance (see Fig. 10-27 (F) and Fig. 10-34 (A)).

When the reach performance of these super reaches begins, the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R are moved to the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5, respectively, and the decorative pattern displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5Cni becomes temporarily invisible.

As shown in Fig. 10-28(A) and Fig. 10-28(B), when the second half of the battle presentation, which is the reach presentation of Super Reach α1, begins, as shown in Fig. 10-28(C), a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A starts to be displayed. During the video, as shown in Fig. 10-28(C) to Fig. 10-28(F), during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, the images of ally character A and enemy character A are enlarged when ally character A is about to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character A.

In particular, during the first and second enlarged display periods (FIGS. 10-28(D) to 10-28(F)), the images of ally character A and enemy character A are displayed on the image display device 5 with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28(A) to 10-28(C)), and an image (movable body action suggestion performance A) of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S moving at speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed superimposed on the low-contrast images of ally character A and enemy character A. At this time, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can easily recognize the movement of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-28(E) to FIG. 10-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character A and enemy character A are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during this predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated.

As shown in Figures 10-29 (H) and 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character A and enemy character A, as movable body operation presentation A, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character A and ally character A winning, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Fig. 10-29(J) and Fig. 10-29(K), a miss notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character A hits ally character A and the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state (a miss). At this time, on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in Fig. 10-29(I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a miss, and then stops while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 10-30(A) and Fig. 10-30(B), when the battle performance (reach performance) for the reach performance of Super Reach α2 reaches the latter half, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed as shown in Fig. 10-30(C). During the video, as shown in Fig. 10-30(C) to Fig. 10-30(F), the images of ally character A and enemy character B are enlarged when ally character A is about to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character B during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period described above.

In particular, during the first and second enlarged display periods (FIGS. 10-30(D) to 10-30(F)), the images of ally character A and enemy character B are displayed on the image display device 5 with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30(A) to 10-30(C)), and an image (movable body action suggestion performance A) of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S moving at speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed superimposed on the low-contrast images of ally character A and enemy character B. At this time, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can easily recognize the movement of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character A and enemy character B are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during this predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated.

As shown in Figures 10-31(G) to 10-31(I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping with the images of friendly character A and enemy character B, as movable body operation presentation A, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B and ally character A winning, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Fig. 10-31(J) and Fig. 10-31(K), a miss notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character B hits ally character A and the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state (a miss). At this time, on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in Fig. 10-29(I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a miss, and then stops while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 10-32(A) and Fig. 10-32(B), when the battle performance (reach performance) for Super Reach β1 reaches the latter half, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A starts to be displayed as shown in Fig. 10-32(C). During the video, as shown in Fig. 10-32(C) to Fig. 10-32(F), the images of ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged when ally character B attempts to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character A during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period described above.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved between the retracted position and the suggested position as movable body operation suggestion performance B (the movable body unit 109SG400 is repeatedly changed from the first state to the second state and from the second state to the first state).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-32(D) and FIG. 10-32(E), during the period when the images of ally character B and enemy character A are being enlarged, an effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, and the enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character B and enemy character A are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated during the predetermined period.

As shown in Figures 10-33(G) to 10-33(I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character B and enemy character A, as movable body operation presentation B.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video in which ally character B's attack hits enemy character A and ally character A wins, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Fig. 10-33(J) and Fig. 10-33(K), a miss notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character A hits ally character B and the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state (a miss). At this time, on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in Fig. 10-29(I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a miss, and then stops while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 10-34(A) and Fig. 10-34(B), when the battle performance (reach performance) for Super Reach β2 reaches the latter half, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed as shown in Fig. 10-34(C). During the video, as shown in Fig. 10-34(C) to Fig. 10-34(F), the images of ally character B and enemy character B are enlarged when ally character B is about to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character B during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period described above.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved between the retracted position and the suggested position as movable body operation suggestion performance B (the movable body unit 109SG400 is repeatedly changed from the first state to the second state and from the second state to the first state).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-34(D) and FIG. 10-34(E), during the period when the images of ally character B and enemy character A are being enlarged, an effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, and the enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated during the predetermined period.

As shown in Figures 10-35(G) to 10-35(I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character B and enemy character B, as movable body operation presentation B, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video in which ally character B's attack hits enemy character B and ally character A wins, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figures 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), a miss notification is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character B hits ally character B, causing the ally character to be defeated, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state (that it is a miss).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5C on the "right") moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in Figure 10-29 (I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a miss, and then stops while oscillating in the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body operation suggestion performance B is being performed, as shown in Figs. 10-31 to 10-35, but displays the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body operation performance B is being performed. Therefore, by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B, it is possible to make the enlarged display of the images of the friendly characters and enemy characters during the reach performance and the performance action of the movable body operation performance B by the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) more noticeable, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed of the images of each character is different between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, which improves the presentation effect during the enlarged display period. In addition, the movement speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, which reduces the control load on the first movable body 109SG401 during the movable body movement presentation.

As shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed during the second enlargement display period is slower than that during the first enlargement display period, and the enlargement speed during the third enlargement display period after the movable body operation suggestion effect ends is even slower than that during the second enlargement display period, so that the enlarged display of the images of the friendly and enemy characters continues even after the movable body operation suggestion effect ends, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Note that, in this characteristic section 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed during the first enlargement display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed during the third enlargement display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement speed during the third enlargement display period may be the fastest and the enlargement speed during the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed during the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

As shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted during the reach performance including the enlarged display period, so that it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the reach performance from being reduced by the execution of the look-ahead preview performance. Note that, although this characteristic section 109SG illustrates an example of a form in which the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted throughout the entire execution period of the reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period in which the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted may be only a part of the reach performance (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Also, this characteristic section 109SG illustrates an example of a form in which the look-ahead preview performance is not executed during the reach performance as a form of restricting the execution of the look-ahead preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead preview performance may be executed at a lower rate during the reach performance than in other periods.

As shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can see the reach effect while the movable body action suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in Figs. 10-33 and 10-35, the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying an explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body action effect B is being executed. In other words, the visibility of the reach effect effect images (images of friendly characters and enemy characters) changes depending on the operation status of the first movable body 109SG401, making it easier to tell whether the action of the first movable body 109SG401 is an action as a movable body action suggestion effect or an action as a movable body action effect, and the attention level of the first movable body 109SG401 and the reach effect effect effect image can be adjusted.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body movement suggestion presentation is being executed, background music, sound effects, and movement suggestion sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R, while background music, sound effects, and a jackpot notification sound are output from speakers 8L and 8R, so that the player can easily recognize that the presentation sounds output from speakers 8L and 8R are changing before and after the period from the end of the third expanded display period to the start timing of the movable body movement presentation.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for the first movable body 109SG401 to make one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position, and the period T3 is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body operation suggestion performance. This prevents the player from mistaking the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation suggestion performance for the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation suggestion performance, and also prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the movable body operation suggestion performance execution period being longer than the execution period of the movable body operation performance in the reach performance of the suggested target.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation display or the miss notification display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating during the period when the movable body LED 109SG495 is turned off.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-32 and 10-34, in movable body operation suggestion presentation B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in Figures 10-33 and 10-35, in movable body operation presentation B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all operated, making it easier for the player to distinguish whether the operation of the movable body is an operation as part of the movable body operation suggestion presentation or an operation as part of the movable body operation presentation.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C1 during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, and is illuminated at brightness C2, which is brighter than brightness C1, while the movable body operation presentation is being performed. Therefore, the brightness of the movable body LED 109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body operation presentation is being performed, and also increases the player's interest in playing while the movable body operation presentation is being performed.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-30, while movable body action suggestion performance A is being performed, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach performance images (images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period. In other words, the visibility of the reach performance images decreases while movable body action suggestion performance A is being performed, so the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made to stand out, and the movement of these star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the action of the first movable body 109SG401.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 10-29 and 10-31, when movable body operation presentation A is being executed, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 moving from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2 that is faster than speed V1. This makes the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in movable body operation presentation A, and the movement of these multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at speed V2 draws the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. This enhances the presentation effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F), before the movable body operation effect A or the miss notification effect is executed, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden on the image display device 5, making it easier for the player to recognize that the effect that is about to be executed is a movable body operation effect or a miss notification effect.

The characteristic features 109SG of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, the start timing of the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position and the start timing of the enlarged display of the effect images (images of friendly characters and enemy characters) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, if the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect is set to a timing prior to the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the player's attention can be increased to the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given in which the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is almost the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (only the display magnification differs slightly), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as a modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 may be made different from that immediately before the end of the enlarged display period by displaying a specific performance or an effect image on the image display device 5. In this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the end of the enlarged display period.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an example was given of a form in which the image display device 5 can display an explosion effect image 109SG005B in response to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during a reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying an effect image in response to the progress of a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character that is executed as a reach performance.

In this way, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both the explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation, the size of the explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation may be made different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle presentation during the reach presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation, the image transparency of the explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation may be made different. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle presentation during the reach presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, a form in which the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character on the image display device 5 is not changed during the period from the end of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-4, during the period from the end of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance, the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be reduced by setting the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 to a first low visibility state that is lower than that before the enlarged display period ends. Furthermore, when the movable body operation performance is executed (when the variable display result is a jackpot), the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced by setting the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state. By doing this, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the reduced visibility of the friendly and enemy characters on the image display device 5, and when the movable body performance is being performed, attention can be increased to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in Figs. 10-28 to 10-35, the same presentation image (same ally character and enemy character) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation and during the execution of the movable body action presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-5, different presentation images may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation and during the execution of the movable body action presentation. In particular, the number of types of presentation images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation may be greater than the number of types of presentation images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation. In this way, the number of variations of presentation images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation can be increased, thereby improving the interest in playing when the movable body action suggestion presentation is executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-28 to 10-35, the characteristic section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the same performance image (same ally character and enemy character) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of a movable body action suggestion performance and during the execution of a movable body action performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 109SG-6, while the movable body action suggestion performance is being executed, the image display device 5 may display a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image that corresponds to the movable body action suggestion performance, while while the movable body action performance is being executed, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image as the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding to the movable body action performance.

Furthermore, when movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding images and movable body motion performance corresponding images can be displayed on the image display device 5, the display period of the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding images and the display period of the movable body motion performance corresponding images can be made different. In this way, it becomes possible to display the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding images and the movable body motion performance corresponding images for an appropriate period corresponding to the operation (whether the movable body motion suggestion performance is being executed or the movable body motion performance is being executed) of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

Furthermore, when the movable body operation performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, the visibility of the movable body operation performance corresponding image may be reduced by lowering the contrast or brightness of the image display device 5. In this way, when a movable body operation performance is executed, the player's attention can be increased to the movable body operation performance rather than the movable body operation performance corresponding image.

Furthermore, when a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image may be output from the speaker 8L8R, and when a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body action performance corresponding image may be output from the speaker 8L8R. In this way, sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body action suggestion performance is being performed and when the movable body action performance is being performed can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so that the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestion performance or the movable body action performance is being performed.

Furthermore, when a movable body action presentation is executed during a reach presentation (when the variable display result is a jackpot), the image display device 5 may start displaying an image corresponding to the movable body action presentation from a timing prior to the start of the movable body action presentation. This can heighten the player's anticipation for the movable body action presentation to start during the reach presentation of a super reach, and can also increase attention to the movable body action presentation.

In the characteristic portion 109SG, in the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, a form in which a display is executed in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 on the image display device 5 as the movable body operation suggestion performance A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 may be variable within a predetermined range rather than a constant speed. In this case, for example, as the movable body operation suggestion performance A, when multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is changed to a slower speed as they approach the first movable body 109SG401 (the speed V1 is changed to a slower speed). In addition, the speed V2 of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S when the movable body operation presentation A is being performed may be set to a speed faster than the maximum speed V1. By doing this, the movement speed (speed V1) of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes when the movable body operation suggestion presentation A is being performed, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example is given of a form in which one action suggestion sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of a movable body action suggestion performance, and one jackpot notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of a movable body action performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple sounds may be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Furthermore, in cases where multiple sounds can be output as the action suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound from speakers 8L, 8R, multiple output start timings for the action suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound may be provided, and different sounds may be output from speakers 8L, 8R depending on the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound starts. In this way, the player can easily recognize that a movable body action suggestion performance or a movable body action performance is being performed by the sounds output from speakers 8L, 8R, and since these action suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change depending on the output timing, interest in the game can be increased.

In particular, when the output timing of the action suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the variable display result. In this case, the player can be drawn to the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the type of jackpot or the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the player can be drawn to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in Figs. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved back and forth at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the first movable body 109SG401 is moved back and forth between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the first movable body 109SG401 may be stopped once at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated in a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. In this way, it is possible to prevent loss of synchronism in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, after the movable body operation suggestion performance is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait in a retreat position until the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body operation suggestion performance is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 may be made to wait in the suggested position until the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance is started. In this way, when the movable body operation performance is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the performance position, which can increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, after the movable body operation suggestion performance is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained in the suggested position, which can arouse the player's anticipation for the movable body operation performance to be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in Figures 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same when the movable body operation suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body operation performance is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 may be different when the movable body operation suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body operation performance is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-20, an example is given in which the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) are each executed based on a control timer, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable bodies, the lighting control of the LEDs provided on the pachinko game machine 1 and the output control of the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R may also be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

When performing the update control of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LEDs, and the output control of the performance sound, for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt every 1 ms (S73 to S77 of the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 are executed every 1 ms), and the update control of the performance image is executed every 33 ms, the movement control of the movable body is executed every 1 ms, the lighting control of the LEDs is executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the performance sound is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the update control of the performance image, the lighting control of the LEDs, and the output control of the performance sound are executed, the movement control of the movable body (the drive control of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423) is always executed, so that the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the performance image, the lighting control of the LEDs, and the output control of the performance sound can be executed suitably.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example is given of a form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated while the movable body operation suggestion performance is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of illumination modes of the movable body LED 109SG495 may be provided, and the proportion at which the movable body LED 109SG495 is controlled to the jackpot game state may be varied depending on the illumination mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated while the movable body operation suggestion performance is being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given of a form in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body operation suggestion performance A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body operation suggestion performance A may be provided, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot may be varied depending on which mode the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in as movable body operation suggestion performance A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the characteristic portion 109SG illustrates a form in which the first movable body 109SG401 does not move back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position (movable body movement suggestion effect) during the third expanded display period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the third expanded display period as well. In particular, by making it possible to execute the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position during the third expanded display period in some cases in which the variable display result is a jackpot, the player can be drawn to whether the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the third expanded display period, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, a form is exemplified in which the execution of movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B is suggested by moving multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body operation suggestion performance A) or by repeatedly moving the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body operation suggestion performance B), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B may be suggested in a manner other than the display of these specific images or the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, if the first movable body 109SG401 is equipped with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic part 109SG, the execution of movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B may be suggested by the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, as shown in Fig. 10-28 and Fig. 10-30, a form is exemplified in which, as movable body operation suggestion performance A, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed in a state in which the contrast of the images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is reduced on the image display device 5 (see Fig. 10-28 (D) and Fig. 10-30 (D)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as movable body operation suggestion performance A, the display of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started from a timing (for example, the timing of Fig. 10-28 (C) or Fig. 10-30 (C)) before the contrast of the images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is reduced on the image display device 5.

In this way, when the display of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started at a timing before the contrast of the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is reduced on the image display device 5, the transparency (transparency) of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be increased so that the effect images being displayed on the image display device 5 (the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B in the examples of Figures 10-28 and 10-30) are easier to see than when the contrast is reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-29(G) and other figures, the characteristic portion 109SG shows an example in which an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when a movable body movement performance is being performed, and part of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes invisible due to the explosion effect image 109SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a movable body movement performance is being performed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body movement performance may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, and all other performance images may become invisible.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example was given of a form in which a movable body action presentation is executed during the reach presentation of a super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for executing the movable body action presentation may be a timing other than during the reach presentation of a super reach. For example, as a modified example 109SG-8, as shown in Figures 10-36(A), 10-36(B), and 10-37(C) to 10-37(H), it may be possible to execute the movable body action presentation during the period from when the combination of decorative symbols becomes reach to the start timing of the reach presentation of a super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36(B), after the reach is reached, the movable body operation suggestion effect is first started, and the image display device 5 displays an image of the character with eyes closed as a branching effect to notify whether the reach effect to be executed thereafter will branch into a reach effect with high expectation (high probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state) (for example, the reach effects of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 described in the characteristic section 109SG) or a reach effect with low expectation (low probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state) (for example, a reach effect with lower expectation than the reach effects of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 described in the characteristic section 109SG). As the branching effect, the image of the character with eyes closed is displayed, and the character is gradually enlarged during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 10-37(C).

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation reach performance, the display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character displayed on the image display device 5 opening its eyes, as shown in Figures 10-37(C) to 10-37(E). In other words, in this branching performance, the character displayed on the image display device 5 darkens without opening its eyes, thereby announcing that a high-expectation reach performance will not be executed (a low-expectation reach performance will be executed). After the display area of the image display device 5 has completely darkened (after the branching performance has ended), a low-expectation reach performance is executed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation reach performance, as shown in Figures 10-37 (F) to 10-37 (H), the character displayed on the image display device 5 opens its eyes to notify the user that a high-expectation reach performance will be executed. At this time, a movable body action performance is also executed. Then, after the movable body action performance and the branching performance have ended, a high-expectation reach performance is executed.

In other words, the movable body operation presentation may be executed as a presentation to notify that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, as exemplified in the feature section 109SG, but it may also be executed as a presentation to notify that a high-expectation reach presentation will be executed (a presentation to notify that there is a high expectation that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In addition, in this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in Figures 10-36 (B) and 10-37 (C), an example is shown in which a character with his eyes closed is gradually enlarged as a branching effect on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a character with his eyes closed is gradually enlarged as a branching effect, an effect image such as a converging line may be displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character, so that the player can focus on whether the character will open his eyes or not.

As described above, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example was given of an embodiment in which the present invention is applied as a branch as to whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot during the reach performance of a super reach, but as shown in this modified example 109SG-8, the present invention may also be applied as a branch as to whether a reach performance with low expectation or a reach performance with high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention corresponds to an image of a character (the first specific image is an image of a character with its eyes closed, and the second specific image is an image of a character with its eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention corresponds to an image such as the converging lines described above.

As shown in Figures 10-36 and 10-37, in this modified example 109SG-8, when the movable body action presentation is executed as a presentation to notify that a high expectation reach presentation will be executed, a form is exemplified in which a movable body action suggestion presentation is executed before the execution of the movable body action presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggestion presentation does not have to be executed. In addition, the execution rate of the movable body action presentation after that may differ depending on whether or not the movable body action suggestion presentation is executed (the rate at which a high expectation reach presentation is executed may differ).

In addition, although this specification discloses multiple characteristic features and variations, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic features and variations.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

Other examples of the gaming machine of the present invention include a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes movable bodies (e.g., mounted movable body 32, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) that are operably arranged, and a specific presentation (e.g., movable body 32, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) that notifies the result of the presentation by operating the movable bodies (e.g., first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R). a suggestion effect (e.g., a movable body action suggestion effect A or a movable body action suggestion effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed; a performance execution means (e.g., a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10-19 ); a display means for moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position; and a movable body performance execution means capable of executing a performance in which the movable body (e.g., the mounted movable body 32) is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position, and the performance execution means does not display an effect image for the movable body when executing the suggestion performance, while displaying an effect image for the movable body when executing the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 10-32 to 10-35, during the execution of movable body operation suggestion performance B, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution of the movable body operation performance B, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5. During the execution of the suggestion performance, a specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged (for example, as shown in Figs. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach performance of super reach β1, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed and enlarged, and during the reach performance of super reach β2, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed and enlarged). a portion in which an effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period as shown in FIG. 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, and an advance notice performance (for example, a look-ahead advance notice performance) that foretells that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state can be executed, and the execution of the advance notice performance is restricted when the game is gradually enlarged (for example, a portion in which the execution of the look-ahead advance notice performance is restricted during a reach performance including the enlarged display period as shown in FIG. 10-21 to FIG. 10-24), the specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image that is different from the first specific image, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which an ally character B and an enemy character B are displayed during a reach performance, and enemy character A are displayed), the control period of the movable body by the effect execution means is different from the update period of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control period of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, while the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms), and the movable body effect execution means controls the pseudo-movable body display to the first Examples of such gaming machines include a pseudo-movable body display performance that moves the movable body (e.g., the mounted movable body 32) from the first position to the second position, and a movable body performance that moves the movable body (e.g., the mounted movable body 32) from the first position to the second position, and when the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance in a predetermined period of time, the proportion of the game machine being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period of time.

This configuration allows the effect image to make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the moving body more noticeable, thereby increasing interest in the game. It also prevents the player's attention to the specific image from decreasing due to the execution of the preview performance. It also allows the player to focus on the execution of the moving body performance and the pseudo moving body display performance.

In other words, the effect images can make the performance actions stand out even more, thereby increasing the interest in the performance, and the player will pay attention to the performance in the hope that a moving body performance will be executed when the simulated moving body display performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the performance. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game and easily attract the interest of players when installed in an amusement facility.

The movable body controlled by the performance execution means (e.g., the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R) and the movable body controlled by the movable body performance execution means (e.g., the mounted movable body 32) may be configured as separate movable bodies or as a common movable body. In other words, in the above-mentioned embodiment, specific performances and suggested performances are performed for the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, and in the embodiment described below, a pseudo-movable body display performance is performed for the mounted movable body 32. In addition, a pseudo-movable body display performance may be performed for the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, and a specific performance or suggested performance may be performed for the mounted movable body 32.

Furthermore, an example of a form of a gaming machine that can increase interest in gaming and draw the player's attention to the execution of a movable body presentation and a pseudo-movable body display presentation is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body that can be moved from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and a movable body presentation execution means capable of executing presentations related to the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body, wherein the movable body presentation execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-movable body display presentation that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body presentation that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and a gaming machine that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when the movable body presentation and the pseudo-movable body display presentation are executed by the movable body presentation execution means in a predetermined period of time than when the movable body presentation execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display presentation without executing the movable body presentation in the predetermined period of time. Below, we will explain one example of the form of these gaming machines as well as other examples.

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 14-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form A2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided,
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position),
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 14-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A movable body performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and a performance related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the movable body performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the movable body performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance during the predetermined period without executing the movable body performance (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 14-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form A4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A movable body performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and a performance related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (for example, a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that a development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations for the execution of the notification performance,
The display means includes:
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, after the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display is made non-displayed without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 14-26(A) to (J) and Fig. 14-27(A));
Before executing the notification performance, when the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is made invisible, the notification-related image (e.g., character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figs. 14-26(F) to (J), Fig. 14-27(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, whereas in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form A5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A movable body performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the pseudo movable body display and a performance related to the movable body;
Equipped with
The movable body performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 14-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form A6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 14-40(A) to 14-40(C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 14-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form A7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display means is capable of displaying pseudo-movable body displays including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 14-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 14-16(C) );
The display means includes:
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position (see FIGS. 14-40(A) to (C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 14-40(A) to 14-40(C));
The speed of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is different from the speed of the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See FIG. 14-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or a pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or a pattern PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different. See FIG. 14-10 and FIG. 14-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is being displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect A8 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 14-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 14-36 ).
The specific movement amount is greater than the constant movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 14-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A9 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A8,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIGS. 14-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of aspect A10 is the gaming machine of any one of aspects A1 to A9,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the performance display unit (see FIG. 14-36 (B1) (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 14-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A11,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 14-39(A) );
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 14-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 14-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of aspect A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 14-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect A15 is the gaming machine according to aspect A13 or A14,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, the display means performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 14-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of aspect A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A17,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See FIG. 14-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The gaming machine of aspect A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1 to A16,
The display means is capable of, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIG. 14-43 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 11 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 11 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 11 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the mounted movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 14-1 to 14-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "jackpot", or "minor hit", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used when the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 14-3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 14-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 14-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 14-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game with "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than in other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 14-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or a probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 14-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using the shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning port is entered, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the commands in the start winning port reception command buffer, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning port is entered, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning port is entered, the start winning port entry designation command through the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning port entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first or second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach performance)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 14-9. Fig. 14-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reaches and super reaches.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. Also, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 14-12. Fig. 14-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 14-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as Pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first prepared that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the developer wants them to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to include multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to include multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be further enhanced and the presentation can be diversified, but due to various problems such as those mentioned above, it is often difficult to actually install multiple bodies. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases where a movable body could be mounted but a pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 14-13. Fig. 14-13 (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining a state in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 14-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a rotating shaft 205L, 205R facing in the vertical direction and having the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to the lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see Figure 14-2) built into the performance unit 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting unit 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see Figure 14-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner periphery that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 14-14. Fig. 14-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in Figure 14-14 (A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figure 14-14 (B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 14-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 14-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (indicated by two-dot chain lines in Figure 14-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A to M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A to M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 14-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 14-16(B)), and is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 14-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D corresponding to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and is capable of changing between a first performance display state corresponding to the first performance state and a second performance display state corresponding to the second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 14-15. Fig. 14-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 14-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 14-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 14-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 14-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development, but due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made capable of executing a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1, which will be described below, and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2.

As shown in Figures 14-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance unit M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanical unit M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 14-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanical unit M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 14-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanical unit M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 14-15 (B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 14-15 (B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B about the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A to M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A to M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 14-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B can be moved left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 14-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and can be stopped at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A to M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 14-16 (C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 14-17 (B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 14-16 and 14-17. Figure 14-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 14-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 can be moved vertically between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 14-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 14-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved up and down between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-17 (B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in Figures 14-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 14-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display something that is partially different from the model movable body, or to display something that cannot be achieved with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 14-10. Figure 14-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 14-10, the preview performance A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result being a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 14-34 (A) to (C)).Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 14-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 14-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 14-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the display of a development announcement image Z300 on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 14-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion performance)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B is valid in the development suggestion performance, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead, the button LED 62 (see FIG. 14-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is displayed so that the character image Z310 related to the model overlaps (acts on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5, and then is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 14-26 (A) to (J), Figure 14-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed than a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated tapping operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby announcing that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 14-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 14-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the image is about to be displayed, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 14-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 14-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that has been executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player of whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character deals a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and is defeated by the enemy character, and the player loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 14-29 (E) to (G), Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 14-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 14-11. Figure 14-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 14-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 14-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 13. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 14-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 14-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect, and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect A using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 14-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect, and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect B using table B for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 14-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 14-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". Additionally, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 14-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 14-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 14-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 14-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 14-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 14-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 14-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 14-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-22 (A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 14-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure-win (sure-win A, sure-win B, or sure-win C), when it is a non-sure-win, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-20 (A) are the numbers.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined most frequently, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined most frequently, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined most frequently. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the table for determining the advanced performance B type shown in FIG. 14-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 14-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 14-23 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "not execute". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach misses or normal reach misses, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(A), in the final performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the final performance using the final performance type determination table shown in FIG. 14-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined final performance type is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the final performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which enable the operation of the push button 31B and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once, and for "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which enable the operation of the stick controller 31A and display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 14-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random numbers for determining the preview performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance A, the random numbers for determining the development hint performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance B, and the random numbers for determining the final performance are each set to random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on FIG. 14-25 to FIG. 14-31. FIG. 14-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. FIG. 14-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 14-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 14-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 14-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 14-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. FIG. 14-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 14-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning win. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 14-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 14-25(E), the light-emitting display units Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A, thereby executing the preview performance A that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In addition, an effect image Z60 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a slightly larger form than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 14-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 14-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on to drop the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify the player that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 14-26 (A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 14-26 (B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 14-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated taps of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 14-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 14-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not to display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-26 (J) in FIG. 14-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more effectively building up anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as a display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 14-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 14-27 (D) are different from the development suggestion effect and do not indicate the probability of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors corresponding to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc. displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 14-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (not displayed) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected jackpot probability, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 14-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, an operation prompting image Z53 is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C). On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the object of operation is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push button 31B is pressed (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the stick controller 31A is pulled (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push button 31B or the pull of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described below, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 14-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 14-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 14-31.

As shown in FIG. 14-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 14-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 14-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 14-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then is not illuminated for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then is not illuminated for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 14-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 14-30(E), it moves and displays them to the first performance display position and then erases them. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 14-29, if the variable display result is a miss at the timing when a single push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation effective period in which the operation prompt display is displayed, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 14-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 14-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop notification of a confirmed miss. Also, in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination, the small patterns are displayed as the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 14-33 to Fig. 14-34. Fig. 14-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 14-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it here. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 14-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 14-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 14-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-34(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 14-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 14-35 to Fig. 14-40. Fig. 14-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 14-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 14-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 14-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are the same downward direction. In other words, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in Figures 14-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2 > L1).

As shown in Figures 14-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 14-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to produce an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

As a result, as shown in Figures 14-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it displays the recoil action of the mechanism unit M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance unit M100A, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

Also, as shown in Figures 14-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibrations that occur when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 14-28 to 14-30, the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period of the deciding performance (ta0 to ta10) to notify of a confirmed jackpot, and then executes a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 14-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by having it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position with the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can give the player a surprise.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

The recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the recoil.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during the first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during the second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 14-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 14-40.

As shown in Figures 14-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 14-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 14-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and increasing the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, which allows attention to be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 14-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 14-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second performance display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a comparison of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 with the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison of the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also be a comparison of the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison of the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the amount of movement of the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that the development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then hidden. In the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then hidden without moving and displaying from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over displaying it in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, in the preview performance B. The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (the probability of a jackpot) differs between when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed and when patterns PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is controlled to the jackpot state (the probability of winning) is different. This includes cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot state when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed is 100%, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed is 0%, and cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B is 100%, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display parts Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 14-41. Fig. 14-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in FIG. 14-25, in the characteristic part 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position during a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 14-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 14-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 14-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 14-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 14-42. Fig. 14-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and a second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed in a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 14-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 14-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 14-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 14-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 14-43. Fig. 14-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 14-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 14-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 14-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is exemplified as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be movable and displayed. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. By doing this, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be emphasized by using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, when the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this and various other effects can be applied. In addition, although these various effects can be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in the development suggestion performance, an example is given of a form in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image in the display area including the first specific performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative front-to-back positions of each other, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different.Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small jackpot in the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 32 Mounted movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU
109SG401 First movable body 109SG402L Second movable body 109SG402R Third movable body

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body that is movably provided;
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies a performance result by operating the movable body, and a suggestion performance that suggests that the specific performance will be executed by operating the movable body before the specific performance is executed;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
Equipped with
The movable body is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position,
The performance execution means includes:
When executing the specific performance, a first effect image is displayed for the movable body;
When the suggestion performance is being performed, a specific image is displayed and the appearance of the specific image is changed.
It is possible to execute a notice performance regarding the advantageous state,
During the period in which the aspect of the specific image is being changed, the preview performance is not executed,
A special effect can be executed to notify the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state.
A predetermined effect can be executed before the special effect is executed,
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved during the predetermined performance and the special performance.
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the predetermined performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden;
the effect execution means displays a second effect image different from the first effect image when the pseudo movable body display is displayed in a moving manner;
The pseudo movable body display includes a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display having a different aspect from the first pseudo movable body display.
A gaming machine characterized by: